blob: e1d5b719a28f05f1c292955bd199f70019f899aa [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau9508c1c2010-04-07 23:12:24 +02005 version 1.4.4
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreau9508c1c2010-04-07 23:12:24 +02007 2010/04/07
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100130a smaller value. HAProxy currently only supports the HTTP keep-alive mode on
131the client side, and transforms it to a close mode on the server side.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
145HAProxy supports pipelined requests on the client side and processes them one
146at a time.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200147
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200148
1491.2. HTTP request
150-----------------
151
152First, let's consider this HTTP request :
153
154 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100155 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200156 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
157 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
158 3 User-agent: my small browser
159 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
160 5 Accept: image/png
161
162
1631.2.1. The Request line
164-----------------------
165
166Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
167
168 - a METHOD : GET
169 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
170 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
171
172All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
173which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
174followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
175is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
176desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
177the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
178
179The URI itself can have several forms :
180
181 - A "relative URI" :
182
183 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
184
185 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
186 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
187
188 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
189
190 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
191
192 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
193 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
194 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
195 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
196 must accept this form too.
197
198 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
199 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
200 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200202 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
203 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
204 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
205 other protocols too.
206
207In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
208mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
209on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
210It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
211specific to the language, framework or application in use.
212
213
2141.2.2. The request headers
215--------------------------
216
217The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
218beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
219an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
220Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
221values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
222encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
223the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
224define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
225
226Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
227their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
228"Connection:" header).
229
230The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
231that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
232is one valid form of empty line.
233
234Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
235headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
236about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
237application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
238
239Important note:
240 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
241 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
242 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
243 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
244
245
2461.3. HTTP response
247------------------
248
249An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
250messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
251
252 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100253 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200254 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
255 2 Content-length: 350
256 3 Content-Type: text/html
257
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200258As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
259codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
260response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100261continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
262the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
263following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
264sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
265(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
266correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
267such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
268state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
269over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
270if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
271information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100388
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100402 - tune.rcvbuf.client
403 - tune.rcvbuf.server
404 - tune.sndbuf.client
405 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100406
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200407 * Debugging
408 - debug
409 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200410
411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004123.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413------------------------------------
414
415chroot <jail dir>
416 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
417 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
418 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
419 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
420 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
421 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100422
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200423daemon
424 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
425 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
426 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
427
428gid <number>
429 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
430 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
431 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
432 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100433
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200434group <group name>
435 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
436 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200438log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
440 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100441 configured with "log global".
442
443 <address> can be one of:
444
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100445 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
447 port).
448
449 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
450 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
451 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
452 writeable).
453
454 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200455
456 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
457 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
458 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
459
460 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200461 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
462 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
463 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
464 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
465 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
466 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200467
468 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
469
470nbproc <number>
471 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
472 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
473 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
474 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
475 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
476
477pidfile <pidfile>
478 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
479 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
480 starting the process. See also "daemon".
481
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200482stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200483 [level <level>]
484
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200485 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
486 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100487 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
489
490 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
491 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
492 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
493 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
494 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
495
496 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
497 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
498 counters).
499
500 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
501 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100502
503 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
504 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
505 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
506 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
507 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
508 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
509 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200510
511stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
512 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
513 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100514 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats maxconn <connections>
517 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
518 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
519
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200520uid <number>
521 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
522 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
523 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
524 one. See also "gid" and "user".
525
526ulimit-n <number>
527 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
528 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
529 option.
530
531user <user name>
532 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
533 See also "uid" and "group".
534
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200535node <name>
536 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
537
538 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
539 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
540 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
541 traffic.
542
543description <text>
544 Add a text that describes the instance.
545
546 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
547 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
548 "<" and ">" characters.
549
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200552-----------------------
553
554maxconn <number>
555 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
556 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
557 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
558 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
559
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100560maxpipes <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
562 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
563 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
564 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
565 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
566 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
567
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200568noepoll
569 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
570 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
571 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
572
573nokqueue
574 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
577
578nopoll
579 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
580 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100581 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200582 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
583 "nokqueue".
584
585nosepoll
586 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
587 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
588 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
589
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100590nosplice
591 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
592 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
593 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100594 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
596 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
597 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
598 "option splice-response".
599
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200600spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
601 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
602 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
603 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
604 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
605 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
606
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200607tune.bufsize <number>
608 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
609 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
610 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
611 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
612 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
613 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
614 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
615 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
616
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100617tune.maxaccept <number>
618 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
619 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
620 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100621 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
623 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100624 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100625 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
626
627tune.maxpollevents <number>
628 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
629 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
630 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
631 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
632 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
633
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200634tune.maxrewrite <number>
635 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
636 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
637 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
638 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
639 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
640 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
641 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
642 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
643 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
644 bufsize.
645
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100646tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
647tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
648 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
649 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
650 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
651 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
652 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
653 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
654 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
655
656tune.sndbuf.client <number>
657tune.sndbuf.server <number>
658 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
659 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
660 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
661 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
662 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
663 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
664 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
665 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
666 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
667 notifying haproxy again.
668
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200669
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006703.3. Debugging
671--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200672
673debug
674 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
675 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
676 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
677 system startup.
678
679quiet
680 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
681 line argument "-q".
682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006833.4. Userlists
684--------------
685It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
686http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
687it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
688
689userlist <listname>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100690 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many independent userlists can be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100691 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
692
693group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100694 Adds group <groupname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100695 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
696 proceeded by "users" keyword.
697
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100698user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
699 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100700 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
701 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100702 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so depending of the system's
703 capabilities, different algorithms are supported. For example modern Glibc
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100704 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
705 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
706
707
708 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100709 userlist L1
710 group G1 users tiger,scott
711 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100712
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100713 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
714 user scott insecure-password elgato
715 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100716
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100717 userlist L2
718 group G1
719 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100720
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100721 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
722 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
723 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100724
725 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200726
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007274. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200728----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100729
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
731 - defaults <name>
732 - frontend <name>
733 - backend <name>
734 - listen <name>
735
736A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
737its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
738section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100739section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200740
741A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
742connections.
743
744A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
745to forward incoming connections.
746
747A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
748parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
749
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100750All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
751'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
752case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
753
754Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
755logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
756proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
757However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
758name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
759
760Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
761and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100762bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100763protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
764modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
765arbitrary criteria.
766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100767
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007684.1. Proxy keywords matrix
769--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100770
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200771The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
772limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
773they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
774limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100775marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200776option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200777and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
778with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
779specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100780
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200781
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100782 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
783------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
784acl - X X X
785appsession - - X X
786backlog X X X -
787balance X - X X
788bind - X X -
789bind-process X X X X
790block - X X X
791capture cookie - X X -
792capture request header - X X -
793capture response header - X X -
794clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
795contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
796cookie X - X X
797default-server X - X X
798default_backend X X X -
799description - X X X
800disabled X X X X
801dispatch - - X X
802enabled X X X X
803errorfile X X X X
804errorloc X X X X
805errorloc302 X X X X
806-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
807errorloc303 X X X X
808fullconn X - X X
809grace X X X X
810hash-type X - X X
811http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
812http-request - X X X
813id - X X X
814log X X X X
815maxconn X X X -
816mode X X X X
817monitor fail - X X -
818monitor-net X X X -
819monitor-uri X X X -
820option abortonclose (*) X - X X
821option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
822option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
823option allbackups (*) X - X X
824option checkcache (*) X - X X
825option clitcpka (*) X X X -
826option contstats (*) X X X -
827option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
828option dontlognull (*) X X X -
829option forceclose (*) X X X X
830-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
831option forwardfor X X X X
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +0200832option http-pretend-keepalive (*) X X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100833option http-server-close (*) X X X X
834option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
835option httpchk X - X X
836option httpclose (*) X X X X
837option httplog X X X X
838option http_proxy (*) X X X X
839option independant-streams (*) X X X X
840option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
841option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
842option logasap (*) X X X -
843option mysql-check X - X X
844option nolinger (*) X X X X
845option originalto X X X X
846option persist (*) X - X X
847option redispatch (*) X - X X
848option smtpchk X - X X
849option socket-stats (*) X X X -
850option splice-auto (*) X X X X
851option splice-request (*) X X X X
852option splice-response (*) X X X X
853option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
854option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
855-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
856option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
857option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
858option tcpka X X X X
859option tcplog X X X X
860option transparent (*) X - X X
861persist rdp-cookie X - X X
862rate-limit sessions X X X -
863redirect - X X X
864redisp (deprecated) X - X X
865redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
866reqadd - X X X
867reqallow - X X X
868reqdel - X X X
869reqdeny - X X X
870reqiallow - X X X
871reqidel - X X X
872reqideny - X X X
873reqipass - X X X
874reqirep - X X X
875reqisetbe - X X X
876reqitarpit - X X X
877reqpass - X X X
878reqrep - X X X
879-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
880reqsetbe - X X X
881reqtarpit - X X X
882retries X - X X
883rspadd - X X X
884rspdel - X X X
885rspdeny - X X X
886rspidel - X X X
887rspideny - X X X
888rspirep - X X X
889rsprep - X X X
890server - - X X
891source X - X X
892srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
893stats auth X - X X
894stats enable X - X X
895stats hide-version X - X X
896stats realm X - X X
897stats refresh X - X X
898stats scope X - X X
899stats show-desc X - X X
900stats show-legends X - X X
901stats show-node X - X X
902stats uri X - X X
903-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
904stick match - - X X
905stick on - - X X
906stick store-request - - X X
907stick-table - - X X
908tcp-request content accept - X X -
909tcp-request content reject - X X -
910tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
911timeout check X - X X
912timeout client X X X -
913timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
914timeout connect X - X X
915timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
916timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
917timeout http-request X X X X
918timeout queue X - X X
919timeout server X - X X
920timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
921timeout tarpit X X X X
922transparent (deprecated) X - X X
923use_backend - X X -
924------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
925 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200926
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100927
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009284.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
929---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100930
931This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
932
933
934acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
935 Declare or complete an access list.
936 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
937 no | yes | yes | yes
938 Example:
939 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
940 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
941 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
942
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200943 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100944
945
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100946appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
947 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100948 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
949 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
950 no | no | yes | yes
951 Arguments :
952 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
953 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
954
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100955 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100956 checked in each cookie value.
957
958 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
959 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
960 milliseconds.
961
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200962 request-learn
963 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
964 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
965 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
966 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
967 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
968 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
969
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100970 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
971 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
972 data following this prefix.
973
974 Example :
975 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
976
977 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
978 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
979
980 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
981 2 modes are currently supported :
982 - path-parameters :
983 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
984 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
985 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
986 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
987 - query-string :
988 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
989 query string.
990
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100991 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
992 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
993 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
994 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100995 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
996 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
997 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100998 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
999 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
1000
1001 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1002
1003 Example :
1004 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1005
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01001006 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick" and "stick-table".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001007
1008
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001009backlog <conns>
1010 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1011 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1012 yes | yes | yes | no
1013 Arguments :
1014 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1015 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1016 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1017
1018 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1019 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1020 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1021 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1022 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1023 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1024 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1025 backlog parameter.
1026
1027 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1028 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1029 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1030
1031 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1032
1033
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001034balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001035balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001036 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1037 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1038 yes | no | yes | yes
1039 Arguments :
1040 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1041 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1042 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1043 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1044
1045 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1046 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1047 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1048 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001049 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1050 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1051 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1052 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1053 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1054 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1055 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1056 it, so that you don't worry.
1057
1058 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1059 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1060 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1061 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1062 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1063 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1064 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1065 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001066
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001067 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1068 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1069 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1070 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1071 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1072 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1073 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1074 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1075
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001076 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1077 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1078 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1079 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1080 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1081 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1082 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1083 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001084 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001085 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001086 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1087 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1088 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001089
1090 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1091 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1092 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1093 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1094 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1095 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1096 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001097 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1098 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1099 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001100
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001101 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1102 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1103 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1104 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1105 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1106 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1107 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1108 URIs start with a leading "/".
1109
1110 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1111 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1112 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1113 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1114
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001115 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001116 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1117
1118 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1119 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1120 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1121 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1122 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1123 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1124 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1125 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1126 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1127 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1128 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1129 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1130 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1131 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1132 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1133 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1134 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1135 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1136 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1137 be randomly balanced if at all.
1138
1139 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1140 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1141 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1142 server will receive the request.
1143
1144 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1145 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1146 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1147 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1148 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001149 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1150 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1151 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001152
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001153 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1154 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1155 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001156 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001157 algorithm is applied instead.
1158
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001159 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001160 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1161 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1162 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1163
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001164 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1165 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1166 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1167
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001168 rdp-cookie
1169 rdp-cookie(name)
1170 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1171 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1172 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1173 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1174 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1175 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001176 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001177 used instead.
1178
1179 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1180 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1181 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1182 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1183
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001184 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1185 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1186 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1187
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001188 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001189 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1190 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001191
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001192 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001193 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001194
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001195 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1196 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1197 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001198
1199 Examples :
1200 balance roundrobin
1201 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001202 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001203 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1204 balance hdr(host)
1205 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001206
1207 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1208 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1209
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001210 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001211 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1212 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1213 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1214 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1215
1216 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1217 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1218 defaults to 16 kB.
1219
1220 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1221 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1222
1223 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1224 Round Robin.
1225
1226 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1227 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1228 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1229 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1230
1231 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1232
1233 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001234 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001235 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1236 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1237 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001238
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001239 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1240 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001241
1242
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001243bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...]
1244bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] interface <interface>
1245bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
1246bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] transparent
1247bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] id <id>
1248bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] name <name>
1249bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001250 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1251 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1252 no | yes | yes | no
1253 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001254 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1255 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1256 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1257 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1258 special address "0.0.0.0".
1259
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001260 <port_range> is either a unique TCP port, or a port range for which the
1261 proxy will accept connections for the IP address specified
1262 above. The port is mandatory. Note that in the case of an
1263 IPv6 address, the port is always the number after the last
1264 colon (':'). A range can either be :
1265 - a numerical port (ex: '80')
1266 - a dash-delimited ports range explicitly stating the lower
1267 and upper bounds (ex: '2000-2100') which are included in
1268 the range.
1269
1270 Particular care must be taken against port ranges, because
1271 every <address:port> couple consumes one socket (= a file
1272 descriptor), so it's easy to consume lots of descriptors
1273 with a simple range, and to run out of sockets. Also, each
1274 <address:port> couple must be used only once among all
1275 instances running on a same system. Please note that binding
1276 to ports lower than 1024 generally require particular
1277 privileges to start the program, which are independant of
1278 the 'uid' parameter.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001279
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001280 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1281 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1282 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1283 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1284 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1285 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1286 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1287 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1288 privileges.
1289
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001290 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1291 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1292 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1293 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1294 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1295 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1296 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1297 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1298
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001299 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1300 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1301 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1302 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001303
1304 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1305
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001306 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1307 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1308 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001309 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001310 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1311 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1312 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1313 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1314 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001315
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001316 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1317 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1318 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1319 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1320 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1321 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1322 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1323 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1324 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1325 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1326 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1327 with front firewalls which would see an established
1328 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1329
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001330 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1331 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1332 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1333 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1334 in a frontend.
1335
1336 Example :
1337 listen http_proxy
1338 bind :80,:443
1339 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1340
1341 See also : "source".
1342
1343
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001344bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1345 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1346 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1347 yes | yes | yes | yes
1348 Arguments :
1349 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1350 may be used to override a default value.
1351
1352 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1353 option may be combined with other numbers.
1354
1355 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1356 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1357 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1358 missing from all processes.
1359
1360 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1361 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1362 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1363 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1364
1365 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1366 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1367 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1368 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1369 and 'even' instances.
1370
1371 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1372 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1373 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1374 32.
1375
1376 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1377 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1378
1379 Example :
1380 listen app_ip1
1381 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1382 bind_process odd
1383
1384 listen app_ip2
1385 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1386 bind_process even
1387
1388 listen management
1389 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1390 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1391
1392 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1393
1394
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001395block { if | unless } <condition>
1396 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1397 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1398 no | yes | yes | yes
1399
1400 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1401 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001402 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001403 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1404 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1405 "block" statements per instance.
1406
1407 Example:
1408 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1409 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1410 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1411 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1412
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001413 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001414
1415
1416capture cookie <name> len <length>
1417 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1418 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1419 no | yes | yes | no
1420 Arguments :
1421 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1422 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1423 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1424 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1425 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1426
1427 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1428 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1429 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1430 right if it exceeds <length>.
1431
1432 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1433 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1434 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1435 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1436
1437 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1438 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1439 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1440
1441 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1442 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1443 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1444 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001445 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001446 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1447
1448 Example:
1449 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1450
1451 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001452 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001453
1454
1455capture request header <name> len <length>
1456 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1457 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1458 no | yes | yes | no
1459 Arguments :
1460 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001461 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001462 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1463 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1464 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1465
1466 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1467 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1468 it exceeds <length>.
1469
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001470 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001471 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1472 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001473 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1474 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1475 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1476 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001477 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001478 environments to find where the request came from.
1479
1480 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1481 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1482 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1483 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001484
1485 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1486 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1487 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1488 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1489
1490 Example:
1491 capture request header Host len 15
1492 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1493 capture request header Referrer len 15
1494
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001495 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001496 about logging.
1497
1498
1499capture response header <name> len <length>
1500 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1501 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1502 no | yes | yes | no
1503 Arguments :
1504 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001505 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001506 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1507 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1508 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1509
1510 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1511 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1512 it exceeds <length>.
1513
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001514 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001515 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1516 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1517 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001518 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1519 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1520 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1521 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001522
1523 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1524 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1525 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1526 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1527
1528 Example:
1529 capture response header Content-length len 9
1530 capture response header Location len 15
1531
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001532 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001533 about logging.
1534
1535
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001536clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001537 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1538 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1539 yes | yes | yes | no
1540 Arguments :
1541 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1542 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1543 as explained at the top of this document.
1544
1545 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1546 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1547 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1548 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1549 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1550 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1551 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1552 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001553 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001554 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1555 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1556
1557 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1558 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1559 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1560 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1561 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1562 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1563
1564 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1565 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1566
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001567 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1568 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001569
1570
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001571contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001572 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1573 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1574 yes | no | yes | yes
1575 Arguments :
1576 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1577 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1578 as explained at the top of this document.
1579
1580 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001581 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001582 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001583 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1584 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1585 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1586 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1587
1588 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1589 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1590 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1591 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1592 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1593 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1594
1595 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1596 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1597 instead.
1598
1599 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1600 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1601
1602
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001603cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001604 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001605 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1606 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1607 yes | no | yes | yes
1608 Arguments :
1609 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1610 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1611 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1612 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1613 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1614 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1615 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1616 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1617 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1618
1619 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1620 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1621 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1622 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1623 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1624 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1625 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1626 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1627 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1628 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1629 "insert" and "prefix".
1630
1631 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1632 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1633 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1634 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1635 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1636 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1637 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1638 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1639 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1640
1641 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1642 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1643 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1644 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1645 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1646 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1647 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1648 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1649 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1650 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1651 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1652
1653 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1654 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1655 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1656 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1657 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1658 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1659 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1660 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1661 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1662 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1663
1664 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1665 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1666 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1667 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1668 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1669 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1670 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1671 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1672 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1673
1674 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1675 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1676 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1677 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1678 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1679 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1680 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1681 persistence cookie in the cache.
1682 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1683
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001684 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001685 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001686 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1687 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1688 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1689 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1690 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1691 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001692
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001693 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1694 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1695 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1696 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001697
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001698 Examples :
1699 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1700 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1701 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1702
1703 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1704
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001705
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001706default-server [param*]
1707 Change default options for a server in a backend
1708 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1709 yes | no | yes | yes
1710 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001711 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1712 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1713 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1714 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001715
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001716 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001717 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1718
1719 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001720
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001721
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001722default_backend <backend>
1723 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1724 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1725 yes | yes | yes | no
1726 Arguments :
1727 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1728
1729 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1730 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1731 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1732 will catch all undetermined requests.
1733
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001734 Example :
1735
1736 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1737 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1738 default_backend dynamic
1739
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001740 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1741
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001742
1743disabled
1744 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1745 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1746 yes | yes | yes | yes
1747 Arguments : none
1748
1749 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1750 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1751 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1752 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1753 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1754 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1755 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1756
1757 See also : "enabled"
1758
1759
1760enabled
1761 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1762 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1763 yes | yes | yes | yes
1764 Arguments : none
1765
1766 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1767 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1768
1769 See also : "disabled"
1770
1771
1772errorfile <code> <file>
1773 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1774 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1775 yes | yes | yes | yes
1776 Arguments :
1777 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1778 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1779
1780 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001781 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001782 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001783 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1784 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001785
1786 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1787 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1788 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1789
1790 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1791 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1792 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1793 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1794
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001795 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1796 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1797 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1798 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1799 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1800 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1801
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001802 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1803 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1804 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001805 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001806 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1807
1808 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1809
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001810 Example :
1811 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1812 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1813 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1814
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001815
1816errorloc <code> <url>
1817errorloc302 <code> <url>
1818 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1819 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1820 yes | yes | yes | yes
1821 Arguments :
1822 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1823 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1824
1825 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1826 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1827 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1828 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1829 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1830
1831 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1832 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1833 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1834
1835 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1836 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1837 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1838 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1839 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1840 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1841 request.
1842
1843 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1844
1845
1846errorloc303 <code> <url>
1847 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1848 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1849 yes | yes | yes | yes
1850 Arguments :
1851 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1852 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1853
1854 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1855 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1856 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1857 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1858 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1859
1860 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1861 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1862 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1863
1864 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1865 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1866 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1867 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001868 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001869
1870 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1871
1872
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001873force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1874 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1875 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1876 no | yes | yes | yes
1877
1878 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1879 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1880 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1881 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1882 marked down for maintenance operations.
1883
1884 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1885 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1886 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1887 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1888 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1889 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1890 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1891 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1892 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1893
1894 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1895 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1896 is used.
1897
1898 See also : "option redispatch", "persist", and section 7 about ACL usage.
1899
1900
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001901fullconn <conns>
1902 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1903 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1904 yes | no | yes | yes
1905 Arguments :
1906 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1907 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1908
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001909 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001910 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001911 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001912 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1913 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1914 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1915 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1916 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001917 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001918
1919 Example :
1920 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1921 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1922 # connections.
1923 backend dynamic
1924 fullconn 10000
1925 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1926 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1927
1928 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1929
1930
1931grace <time>
1932 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1933 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001934 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001935 Arguments :
1936 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1937 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1938 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1939
1940 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1941 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001942 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001943 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1944
1945 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1946 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1947 simplify it.
1948
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001949
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001950hash-type <method>
1951 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1952 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1953 yes | no | yes | yes
1954 Arguments :
1955 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1956 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1957 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1958 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1959 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1960 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1961 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1962 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1963 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1964
1965 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1966 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1967 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1968 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1969 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1970 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1971 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1972 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1973 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1974 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1975 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1976 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1977 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1978
1979 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1980
1981 See also : "balance", "server"
1982
1983
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001984http-check disable-on-404
1985 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1986 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001987 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001988 Arguments : none
1989
1990 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1991 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1992 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1993 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1994 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1995 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1996 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1997 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1998 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1999
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002000 See also : "option httpchk"
2001
2002
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002003http-check send-state
2004 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
2005 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2006 yes | no | yes | yes
2007 Arguments : none
2008
2009 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
2010 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
2011 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
2012 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
2013 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
2014
2015 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
2016 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2017 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2018 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2019 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2020 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2021 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2022 checked in multiple backends.
2023
2024 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2025 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2026
2027 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2028 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2029 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2030 one fails.
2031
2032 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2033 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2034 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2035
2036 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2037 server's queue.
2038
2039 Example of a header received by the application server :
2040 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2041 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2042
2043 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2044
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002045http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2046 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002047 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2048
2049 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2050 no | yes | yes | yes
2051
2052 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2053 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2054 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2055 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2056 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2057 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2058
2059 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2060 instance.
2061
2062 Example:
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002063 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2064 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2065 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002066
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002067 http-request allow if nagios
2068 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2069 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2070 http-request deny
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002071
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002072 Example:
2073 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002074
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002075 http-request auth unless auth_ok
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002076
2077 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002078
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002079id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002080 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2081 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2082 no | yes | yes | yes
2083 Arguments : none
2084
2085 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2086 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2087 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002088
2089
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002090log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002091log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002092 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2093 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2094 yes | yes | yes | yes
2095 Arguments :
2096 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2097 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2098 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2099 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2100 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2101 parameter.
2102
2103 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2104 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2105
2106 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2107 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2108 standard syslog port).
2109
2110 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2111 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2112 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2113 appropriately writeable).
2114
2115 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2116
2117 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2118 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2119 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2120
2121 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2122 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2123 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002124 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2125 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2126 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2127 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2128 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002129
2130 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2131
2132 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2133 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2134 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2135
2136 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002137 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2138 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2139 "info".
2140
2141 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2142 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2143 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2144 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2145
2146 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2147 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002148
2149 Example :
2150 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002151 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2152 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002153
2154
2155maxconn <conns>
2156 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2157 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2158 yes | yes | yes | no
2159 Arguments :
2160 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2161 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2162 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2163 closes.
2164
2165 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2166 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2167 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2168 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2169 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2170 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2171 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2172 properly tuned.
2173
2174 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2175 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2176 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2177
2178 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2179
2180
2181mode { tcp|http|health }
2182 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2183 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2184 yes | yes | yes | yes
2185 Arguments :
2186 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2187 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2188 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2189 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2190
2191 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2192 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2193 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2194 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2195 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2196
2197 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2198 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2199 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2200 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2201 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2202 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2203
2204 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2205 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2206 will be refused.
2207
2208 Example :
2209 defaults http_instances
2210 mode http
2211
2212 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2213
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002214
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002215monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002216 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002217 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2218 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002219 Arguments :
2220 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2221 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002222 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002223 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2224 backend and its backup.
2225
2226 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2227 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2228 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2229 servers in a list of backends.
2230
2231 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2232 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2233 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2234 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2235 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2236 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2237 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002238 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002239
2240 Example:
2241 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002242 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002243 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2244 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2245 monitor-uri /site_alive
2246 monitor fail if site_dead
2247
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002248 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2249
2250
2251monitor-net <source>
2252 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2253 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2254 yes | yes | yes | no
2255 Arguments :
2256 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2257 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2258 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2259 followed by a mask.
2260
2261 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2262 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002263 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002264 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2265
2266 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2267 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2268 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2269 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2270 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2271
2272 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2273 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2274 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2275 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2276 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2277
Willy Tarreau95cd2832010-03-04 23:36:33 +01002278 Last, please note that only one "monitor-net" statement can be specified in
2279 a frontend. If more than one is found, only the last one will be considered.
2280
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002281 Example :
2282 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2283 frontend www
2284 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2285
2286 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2287
2288
2289monitor-uri <uri>
2290 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2291 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2292 yes | yes | yes | no
2293 Arguments :
2294 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2295 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2296
2297 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2298 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2299 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2300 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2301 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2302 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2303 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2304 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2305
2306 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2307 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2308 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2309 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2310 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2311 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2312
2313 Example :
2314 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2315 frontend www
2316 mode http
2317 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2318
2319 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2320
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002321
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002322option abortonclose
2323no option abortonclose
2324 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2325 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2326 yes | no | yes | yes
2327 Arguments : none
2328
2329 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2330 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2331 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2332 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002333 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002334 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2335 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2336 encountered while delivering the response.
2337
2338 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2339 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2340 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2341 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2342 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2343 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002344 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002345 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002346 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002347 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2348 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2349 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2350
2351 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2352 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2353 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2354 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2355 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2356 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2357 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2358 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002359 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002360
2361 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2362 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2363
2364 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2365
2366
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002367option accept-invalid-http-request
2368no option accept-invalid-http-request
2369 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2370 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2371 yes | yes | yes | no
2372 Arguments : none
2373
2374 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2375 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2376 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2377 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2378 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2379 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2380 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2381 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2382 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2383
2384 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2385 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2386 been confirmed.
2387
2388 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2389 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2390 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2391 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2392
2393 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2394 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2395
2396 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2397 stats socket.
2398
2399
2400option accept-invalid-http-response
2401no option accept-invalid-http-response
2402 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2403 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2404 yes | no | yes | yes
2405 Arguments : none
2406
2407 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2408 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2409 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2410 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2411 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2412 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2413 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2414 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2415 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2416
2417 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2418 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2419 been confirmed.
2420
2421 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2422 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2423 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2424 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2425
2426 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2427 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2428
2429 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2430 stats socket.
2431
2432
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002433option allbackups
2434no option allbackups
2435 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2436 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2437 yes | no | yes | yes
2438 Arguments : none
2439
2440 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2441 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2442 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2443 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2444 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2445 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2446 order between the backup servers anymore.
2447
2448 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2449 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2450
2451 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2452 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2453
2454
2455option checkcache
2456no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002457 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002458 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2459 yes | no | yes | yes
2460 Arguments : none
2461
2462 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2463 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002464 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002465 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2466 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2467 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2468
2469 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002470 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002471 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002472 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2473 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002474 to the client are :
2475 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002476 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002477 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002478 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2479 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2480 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2481 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2482 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2483 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2484 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2485 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2486 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2487 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2488 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2489
2490 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002491 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002492 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002493 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002494 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2495
2496 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2497 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002498 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002499 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2500
2501 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2502 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2503
2504
2505option clitcpka
2506no option clitcpka
2507 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2508 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2509 yes | yes | yes | no
2510 Arguments : none
2511
2512 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2513 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2514 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2515 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2516
2517 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2518 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2519 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2520 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2521
2522 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2523 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2524 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2525 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2526 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2527
2528 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2529
2530 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2531 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2532 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2533
2534 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2535 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2536
2537 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2538
2539
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002540option contstats
2541 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2542 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2543 yes | yes | yes | no
2544 Arguments : none
2545
2546 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2547 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2548 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2549 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2550 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2551 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2552 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2553
2554
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002555option dontlog-normal
2556no option dontlog-normal
2557 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2558 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2559 yes | yes | yes | no
2560 Arguments : none
2561
2562 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2563 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2564 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2565 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2566 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2567 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2568 logged.
2569
2570 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2571 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2572 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2573
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002574 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002575 logging.
2576
2577
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002578option dontlognull
2579no option dontlognull
2580 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2581 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2582 yes | yes | yes | no
2583 Arguments : none
2584
2585 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2586 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2587 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2588 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2589 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2590 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2591 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2592
2593 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2594 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2595 would not be logged.
2596
2597 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2598 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2599
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002600 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002601
2602
2603option forceclose
2604no option forceclose
2605 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2606 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002607 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002608 Arguments : none
2609
2610 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2611 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2612 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2613 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2614 global session times in the logs.
2615
2616 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002617 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002618 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2619 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2620 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2621 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002622
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002623 This option may also be combined with "option http-pretend-keepalive", which
2624 will disable sending of the "Connection: close" header, but will still cause
2625 the connection to be closed once the whole response is received.
2626
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002627 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2628 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2629
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002630 See also : "option httpclose" and "option http-pretend-keepalive"
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002631
2632
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002633option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002634 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2635 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2636 yes | yes | yes | yes
2637 Arguments :
2638 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2639 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002640 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002641 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002642
2643 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2644 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2645 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2646 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2647 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2648 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2649 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002650 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2651 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2652 possible that the client has already brought one.
2653
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002654 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002655 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002656 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2657 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002658 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2659 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002660
2661 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2662 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2663 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2664 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2665 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2666 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2667 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2668
2669 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002670 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2671 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2672 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002673
2674 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2675 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2676 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2677 when using this option.
2678
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002679 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002680 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2681 frontend www
2682 mode http
2683 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2684
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002685 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2686 backend www
2687 mode http
2688 option forwardfor header X-Client
2689
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002690 See also : "option httpclose"
2691
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002692
2693option http-pretend-keepalive
2694no option http-pretend-keepalive
2695 Define whether haproxy will announce keepalive to the server or not
2696 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2697 yes | yes | yes | yes
2698 Arguments : none
2699
2700 When running with "option http-server-close" or "option forceclose", haproxy
2701 adds a "Connection: close" header to the request forwarded to the server.
2702 Unfortunately, when some servers see this header, they automatically refrain
2703 from using the chunked encoding for responses of unknown length, while this
2704 is totally unrelated. The immediate effect is that this prevents haproxy from
2705 maintaining the client connection alive. A second effect is that a client or
2706 a cache could receive an incomplete response without being aware of it, and
2707 consider the response complete.
2708
2709 By setting "option http-pretend-keepalive", haproxy will make the server
2710 believe it will keep the connection alive. The server will then not fall back
2711 to the abnormal undesired above. When haproxy gets the whole response, it
2712 will close the connection with the server just as it would do with the
2713 "forceclose" option. That way the client gets a normal response and the
2714 connection is correctly closed on the server side.
2715
2716 It is recommended not to enable this option by default, because most servers
2717 will more efficiently close the connection themselves after the last packet,
2718 and release its buffers slightly earlier. Also, the added packet on the
2719 network could slightly reduce the overall peak performance. However it is
2720 worth noting that when this option is enabled, haproxy will have slightly
2721 less work to do. So if haproxy is the bottleneck on the whole architecture,
2722 enabling this option might save a few CPU cycles.
2723
2724 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2725 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2726 This option has no effect if it is combined with "option httpclose", which
2727 has precedence.
2728
2729 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2730 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2731
2732 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
2733
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002734
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002735option http-server-close
2736no option http-server-close
2737 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2738 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2739 yes | yes | yes | yes
2740 Arguments : none
2741
2742 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2743 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2744 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2745 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2746 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2747 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002748 of RFC2616. Please note that some servers do not always conform to those
2749 requirements when they see "Connection: close" in the request. The effect
2750 will be that keep-alive will never be used. A workaround consists in enabling
2751 "option http-pretend-keepalive".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002752
2753 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2754 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2755 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2756 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002757 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2758 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002759
2760 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2761 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002762 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2763 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2764 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002765
2766 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2767 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2768
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002769 See also : "option forceclose", "option http-pretend-keepalive" and
2770 "option httpclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002771
2772
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002773option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002774no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002775 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2776 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2777 yes | yes | yes | no
2778 Arguments : none
2779
2780 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2781 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2782 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2783 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2784 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2785 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2786 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2787
2788 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2789 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2790 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2791 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2792 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2793 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2794 request along its whole life.
2795
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002796 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2797 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2798 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2799 front of an existing proxy.
2800
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002801 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2802
2803 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2804 http-server-close".
2805
2806
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01002807option httpchk
2808option httpchk <uri>
2809option httpchk <method> <uri>
2810option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2811 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2812 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2813 yes | no | yes | yes
2814 Arguments :
2815 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2816 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2817 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2818 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2819 ones.
2820
2821 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2822 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2823 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2824
2825 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2826 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2827 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2828 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2829 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2830
2831 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2832 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2833 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2834 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2835 the lack of any response.
2836
2837 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2838
2839 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2840 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2841 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2842
2843 Examples :
2844 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2845 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2846 backend https_relay
2847 mode tcp
2848 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
2849 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2850
2851 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2852 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
2853
2854
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002855option httpclose
2856no option httpclose
2857 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2858 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2859 yes | yes | yes | yes
2860 Arguments : none
2861
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002862 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002863 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2864 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2865 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2866 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2867 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2868 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2869 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2870 be removed.
2871
2872 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002873 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2874 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2875 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2876 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2877 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2878 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002879
2880 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2881 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2882 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002883 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2884 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002885
2886 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2887 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2888
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002889 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002890
2891
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002892option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002893 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2894 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2895 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002896 Arguments :
2897 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2898 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2899 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2900 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2901 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002902
2903 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2904 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2905 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2906 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2907 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2908 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2909 ports.
2910
2911 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2912
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002913 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2914 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2915 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2916 by default.
2917
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002918 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002919
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002920
2921option http_proxy
2922no option http_proxy
2923 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2924 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2925 yes | yes | yes | yes
2926 Arguments : none
2927
2928 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2929 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2930 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2931 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2932 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2933
2934 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2935 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2936 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2937 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2938 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2939 be analyzed.
2940
2941 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2942 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2943
2944 Example :
2945 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2946 backend direct_forward
2947 option httpclose
2948 option http_proxy
2949
2950 See also : "option httpclose"
2951
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002952
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002953option independant-streams
2954no option independant-streams
2955 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2956 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2957 yes | yes | yes | yes
2958 Arguments : none
2959
2960 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2961 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2962 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2963 receive data or not.
2964
2965 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2966 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2967 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2968 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2969 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2970 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2971 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2972 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2973 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2974 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2975 socket buffers.
2976
2977 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2978 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2979 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2980 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2981 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2982
2983 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2984
2985
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002986option log-health-checks
2987no option log-health-checks
2988 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2989 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2990 yes | no | yes | yes
2991 Arguments : none
2992
2993 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2994 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2995 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2996 of additional information is limited.
2997
2998 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2999 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
3000
3001 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
3002
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003003
3004option log-separate-errors
3005no option log-separate-errors
3006 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
3007 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3008 yes | yes | yes | no
3009 Arguments : none
3010
3011 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
3012 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
3013 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
3014 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
3015 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
3016 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
3017 provides very important information.
3018
3019 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
3020 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
3021 error logs.
3022
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003023 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003024 logging.
3025
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003026
3027option logasap
3028no option logasap
3029 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
3030 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3031 yes | yes | yes | no
3032 Arguments : none
3033
3034 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
3035 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
3036 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
3037 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
3038 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
3039 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
3040 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003041 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003042 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
3043 bytes are expected to be transferred.
3044
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01003045 Examples :
3046 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
3047 mode http
3048 option httplog
3049 option logasap
3050 log 192.168.2.200 local3
3051
3052 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
3053 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
3054 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
3055 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
3056
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003057 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003058 logging.
3059
3060
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01003061option mysql-check
3062 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
3063 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3064 yes | no | yes | yes
3065 Arguments : none
3066
3067 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
3068 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
3069 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3070 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3071 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3072
3073 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3074 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3075 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3076 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3077 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3078 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3079
3080 See also: "option httpchk"
3081
3082
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003083option nolinger
3084no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003085 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003086 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3087 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003088 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003089
3090 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3091 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3092 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3093 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3094 connections.
3095
3096 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3097 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3098 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3099 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3100 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3101 this too.
3102
3103 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3104 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3105 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3106
3107 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3108 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3109 for servers.
3110
3111 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3112 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3113
3114
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003115option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3116 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3117 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3118 yes | yes | yes | yes
3119 Arguments :
3120 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3121 matching <network>
3122 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3123 header name.
3124
3125 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3126 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3127 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3128 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3129 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3130 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3131 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3132 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3133 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3134 possible that the client has already brought one.
3135
3136 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3137 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3138 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3139 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3140 header and requires different one.
3141
3142 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3143 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3144 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3145 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3146 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3147 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3148 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3149
3150 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3151 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3152 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3153 both are defined.
3154
3155 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3156 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3157 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3158 when using this option.
3159
3160 Examples :
3161 # Original Destination address
3162 frontend www
3163 mode http
3164 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3165
3166 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3167 backend www
3168 mode http
3169 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3170
3171 See also : "option httpclose"
3172
3173
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003174option persist
3175no option persist
3176 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3177 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3178 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003179 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003180
3181 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3182 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3183 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3184 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3185 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3186 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3187 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3188 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3189 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3190 redirected to another valid server.
3191
3192 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3193 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3194
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003195 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003196
3197
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003198option redispatch
3199no option redispatch
3200 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3201 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3202 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003203 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003204
3205 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3206 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3207 be able to access the service anymore.
3208
3209 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3210 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3211
3212 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3213 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3214 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003215
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003216 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3217 "redisp" keywords.
3218
3219 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3220 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3221
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003222 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003223
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003224
3225option smtpchk
3226option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3227 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3228 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3229 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003230 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003231 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3232 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3233 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3234
3235 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3236 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3237 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3238
3239 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3240 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3241 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3242 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3243 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3244 dead server.
3245
3246 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3247 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3248 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3249 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3250
3251 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3252 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3253 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3254 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3255 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3256
3257 Example :
3258 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3259
3260 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3261
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003262
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003263option socket-stats
3264no option socket-stats
3265
3266 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3267 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3268 yes | yes | yes | no
3269
3270 Arguments : none
3271
3272
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003273option splice-auto
3274no option splice-auto
3275 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3276 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3277 yes | yes | yes | yes
3278 Arguments : none
3279
3280 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3281 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3282 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3283 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003284 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003285 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3286 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3287 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3288 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3289
3290 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3291 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3292 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3293 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3294 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3295 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3296 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3297 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3298 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3299 keyword.
3300
3301 Example :
3302 option splice-auto
3303
3304 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3305 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3306
3307 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3308 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3309
3310
3311option splice-request
3312no option splice-request
3313 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3314 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3315 yes | yes | yes | yes
3316 Arguments : none
3317
3318 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3319 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3320 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3321 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3322 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3323 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3324
3325 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3326
3327 Example :
3328 option splice-request
3329
3330 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3331 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3332
3333 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3334 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3335
3336
3337option splice-response
3338no option splice-response
3339 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3340 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3341 yes | yes | yes | yes
3342 Arguments : none
3343
3344 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3345 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3346 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3347 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3348 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3349 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3350
3351 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3352
3353 Example :
3354 option splice-response
3355
3356 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3357 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3358
3359 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3360 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3361
3362
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003363option srvtcpka
3364no option srvtcpka
3365 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3366 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3367 yes | no | yes | yes
3368 Arguments : none
3369
3370 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3371 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3372 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3373 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3374
3375 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3376 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3377 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3378 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3379
3380 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3381 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3382 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3383 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3384 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3385
3386 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3387
3388 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3389 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3390 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3391
3392 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3393 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3394
3395 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3396
3397
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003398option ssl-hello-chk
3399 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3400 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3401 yes | no | yes | yes
3402 Arguments : none
3403
3404 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3405 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3406 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3407 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3408 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3409 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3410 hello message.
3411
3412 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3413 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3414 messages, which is appreciable.
3415
3416 See also: "option httpchk"
3417
3418
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003419option tcp-smart-accept
3420no option tcp-smart-accept
3421 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3422 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3423 yes | yes | yes | no
3424 Arguments : none
3425
3426 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3427 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3428 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3429 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3430 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3431 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3432
3433 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3434 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3435 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3436 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3437
3438 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3439 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3440 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3441 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3442
3443 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3444 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3445 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3446
3447 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3448 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3449 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3450
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003451 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3452
3453
3454option tcp-smart-connect
3455no option tcp-smart-connect
3456 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3457 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3458 yes | no | yes | yes
3459 Arguments : none
3460
3461 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3462 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3463 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3464 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3465 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3466
3467 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3468 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3469 complex.
3470
3471 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3472 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3473 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3474
3475 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3476 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3477
3478 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3479
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003480
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003481option tcpka
3482 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3483 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3484 yes | yes | yes | yes
3485 Arguments : none
3486
3487 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3488 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3489 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3490 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3491
3492 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3493 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3494 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3495 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3496
3497 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3498 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3499 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3500 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3501 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3502
3503 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3504
3505 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3506 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3507 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3508 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3509 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3510 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3511 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3512 backends.
3513
3514 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3515
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003516
3517option tcplog
3518 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3519 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3520 yes | yes | yes | yes
3521 Arguments : none
3522
3523 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3524 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3525 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3526 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3527 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3528 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3529 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3530 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3531
3532 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3533
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003534 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003535
3536
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003537option transparent
3538no option transparent
3539 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3540 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003541 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003542 Arguments : none
3543
3544 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3545 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3546 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3547 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3548 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3549 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3550 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3551 appropriate server.
3552
3553 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3554 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3555
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003556 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3557 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003558
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003559
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003560persist rdp-cookie
3561persist rdp-cookie(name)
3562 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3563 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3564 yes | no | yes | yes
3565 Arguments :
3566 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3567 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3568 no valid reason to change this name.
3569
3570 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3571 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3572 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3573 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3574 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3575 forwarded to this server.
3576
3577 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3578 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3579 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003580 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003581 a single "listen" section.
3582
3583 Example :
3584 listen tse-farm
3585 bind :3389
3586 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3587 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3588 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3589 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3590 persist rdp-cookie
3591 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3592 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3593 balance rdp-cookie
3594 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3595 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3596
3597 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3598
3599
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003600rate-limit sessions <rate>
3601 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3602 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3603 yes | yes | yes | no
3604 Arguments :
3605 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3606 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3607
3608 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3609 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3610 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3611 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3612 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3613 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3614
3615 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3616 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3617 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3618 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3619
3620 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3621 listen smtp
3622 mode tcp
3623 bind :25
3624 rate-limit sessions 10
3625 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3626
3627 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3628 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3629
3630 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3631
3632
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003633redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3634redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003635 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3636 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3637 no | yes | yes | yes
3638
3639 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003640 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003641
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003642 Arguments :
3643 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3644 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3645 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3646 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003647 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3648 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3649 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3650 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003651
3652 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3653 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3654 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3655 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3656 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3657 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3658 location with a GET method.
3659
3660 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3661 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3662
3663 - "drop-query"
3664 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3665 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3666 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3667 with a location-type redirect.
3668
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003669 - "append-slash"
3670 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3671 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3672 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3673 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3674
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003675 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3676 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3677 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3678 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3679 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3680 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3681 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3682
3683 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3684 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3685 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3686 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3687 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3688 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3689 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003690
3691 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3692 acl clear dst_port 80
3693 acl secure dst_port 8080
3694 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003695 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003696 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003697 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3698
3699 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003700 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3701 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3702 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003703 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003704
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003705 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3706 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3707 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3708
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003709 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003710
3711
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003712redisp (deprecated)
3713redispatch (deprecated)
3714 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3715 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3716 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003717 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003718
3719 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3720 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3721 be able to access the service anymore.
3722
3723 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3724 redistribute them to a working server.
3725
3726 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3727 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3728 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003729
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003730 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3731 "option redispatch" instead.
3732
3733 See also : "option redispatch"
3734
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003735
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003736reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003737 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3738 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3739 no | yes | yes | yes
3740 Arguments :
3741 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3742 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003743 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003744
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003745 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3746 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3747
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003748 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3749 the last header of an HTTP request.
3750
3751 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3752 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3753 responses.
3754
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003755 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3756 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3757 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3758
3759 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3760 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003761
3762
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003763reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3764reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003765 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3766 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3767 no | yes | yes | yes
3768 Arguments :
3769 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3770 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3771 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3772 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3773 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3774 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3775 ignores case.
3776
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003777 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3778 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3779
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003780 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3781 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3782 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3783 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003784 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003785
3786 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3787 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3788
3789 Example :
3790 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3791 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3792 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3793
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003794 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3795 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003796
3797
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003798reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3799reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003800 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3801 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3802 no | yes | yes | yes
3803 Arguments :
3804 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3805 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3806 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3807 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3808 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3809 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3810
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003811 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3812 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3813
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003814 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3815 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3816 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3817 next servers.
3818
3819 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3820 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3821 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3822
3823 Example :
3824 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3825 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3826 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3827
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003828 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3829 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003830
3831
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003832reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3833reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003834 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3835 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3836 no | yes | yes | yes
3837 Arguments :
3838 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3839 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3840 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3841 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3842 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3843 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3844 case.
3845
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003846 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3847 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3848
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003849 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3850 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3851 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3852 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003853 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003854
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003855 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003856 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003857 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003858
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003859 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3860 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3861
3862 Example :
3863 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3864 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3865 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3866
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003867 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3868 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003869
3870
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003871reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3872reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003873 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3874 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3875 no | yes | yes | yes
3876 Arguments :
3877 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3878 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3879 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3880 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3881 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3882 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3883 case.
3884
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003885 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3886 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3887
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003888 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3889 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3890 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3891 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3892
3893 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3894 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3895
3896 Example :
3897 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3898 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3899 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3900 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3901
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003902 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3903 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003904
3905
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003906reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3907reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003908 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3909 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3910 no | yes | yes | yes
3911 Arguments :
3912 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3913 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3914 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3915 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3916 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3917 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3918
3919 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3920 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3921 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3922 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003923 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003924
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003925 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3926 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3927
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003928 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3929 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3930 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3931
3932 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3933 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3934 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3935 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3936 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3937
3938 Example :
3939 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3940 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3941 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3942 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3943
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003944 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3945 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003946
3947
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003948reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3949reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003950 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3951 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3952 no | yes | yes | yes
3953 Arguments :
3954 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3955 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3956 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3957 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3958 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3959 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3960 ignores case.
3961
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003962 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3963 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3964
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003965 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3966 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003967 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3968 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3969 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003970 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3971 not set.
3972
3973 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3974 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3975 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3976 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3977 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3978
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003979 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003980 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3981 # block all others.
3982 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3983 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3984
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003985 # block bad guys
3986 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
3987 reqitarpit . if badguys
3988
3989 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
3990 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003991
3992
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003993retries <value>
3994 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3995 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3996 yes | no | yes | yes
3997 Arguments :
3998 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3999 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
4000 default value is 3.
4001
4002 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
4003 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
4004 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
4005
4006 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
4007 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
4008
4009 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
4010 server even if a cookie references a different server.
4011
4012 See also : "option redispatch"
4013
4014
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004015rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004016 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
4017 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4018 no | yes | yes | yes
4019 Arguments :
4020 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4021 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004022 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004023
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004024 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4025 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4026
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004027 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
4028 the last header of an HTTP response.
4029
4030 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4031 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4032 responses.
4033
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004034 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
4035 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004036
4037
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004038rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4039rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004040 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
4041 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4042 no | yes | yes | yes
4043 Arguments :
4044 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4045 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4046 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4047 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4048 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4049 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
4050 ignores case.
4051
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004052 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4053 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4054
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004055 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
4056 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
4057 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
4058 client.
4059
4060 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4061 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4062 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
4063
4064 Example :
4065 # remove the Server header from responses
4066 reqidel ^Server:.*
4067
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004068 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
4069 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004070
4071
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004072rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4073rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004074 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4075 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4076 no | yes | yes | yes
4077 Arguments :
4078 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4079 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4080 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4081 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4082 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4083 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4084 ignores case.
4085
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004086 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4087 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4088
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004089 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4090 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4091 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4092 case-sensitive.
4093
4094 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004095 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4096 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4097 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004098
4099 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4100 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4101
4102 Example :
4103 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4104 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4105
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004106 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4107 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004108
4109
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004110rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4111rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004112 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4113 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4114 no | yes | yes | yes
4115 Arguments :
4116 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4117 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4118 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4119 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4120 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4121 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4122 ignores case.
4123
4124 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4125 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4126 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4127 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004128 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004129
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004130 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4131 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4132
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004133 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4134 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4135 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4136
4137 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4138 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4139 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4140 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4141 are not case-sensitive.
4142
4143 Example :
4144 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4145 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4146
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004147 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4148 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004149
4150
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004151server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4152 Declare a server in a backend
4153 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4154 no | no | yes | yes
4155 Arguments :
4156 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4157 appear in logs and alerts.
4158
4159 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4160 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4161 start-up.
4162
4163 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4164 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4165 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4166 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4167 adding this value to the client's port.
4168
4169 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4170 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004171 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004172
4173 Examples :
4174 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4175 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4176
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004177 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004178
4179
4180source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004181source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004182source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004183 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4184 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4185 yes | no | yes | yes
4186 Arguments :
4187 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4188 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4189 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4190 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4191
4192 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4193 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004194 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4195 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4196 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004197
4198 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4199 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4200 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4201 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4202 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4203 <addr>.
4204
4205 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4206 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4207 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4208 port.
4209
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004210 <hdr> is the name of a HTTP header in which to fetch the IP to bind to.
4211 This is the name of a comma-separated header list which can
4212 contain multiple IP addresses. By default, the last occurrence is
4213 used. This is designed to work with the X-Forwarded-For header
4214 and to automatically bind to the the client's IP address as seen
4215 by previous proxy, typically Stunnel. In order to use another
4216 occurrence from the last one, please see the <occ> parameter
4217 below. When the header (or occurrence) is not found, no binding
4218 is performed so that the proxy's default IP address is used. Also
4219 keep in mind that the header name is case insensitive, as for any
4220 HTTP header.
4221
4222 <occ> is the occurrence number of a value to be used in a multi-value
4223 header. This is to be used in conjunction with "hdr_ip(<hdr>)",
4224 in order to specificy which occurrence to use for the source IP
4225 address. Positive values indicate a position from the first
4226 occurrence, 1 being the first one. Negative values indicate
4227 positions relative to the last one, -1 being the last one. This
4228 is helpful for situations where an X-Forwarded-For header is set
4229 at the entry point of an infrastructure and must be used several
4230 proxy layers away. When this value is not specified, -1 is
4231 assumed. Passing a zero here disables the feature.
4232
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004233 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4234 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4235 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4236 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4237 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4238 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4239
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004240 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4241 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4242 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4243 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4244
4245 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4246 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4247 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4248 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4249 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4250 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4251
4252 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4253 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4254 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4255 there are two methods :
4256
4257 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4258 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4259 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4260 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4261 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4262 of the client ranges may be used.
4263
4264 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4265 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4266 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4267 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4268 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4269 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4270 same session.
4271
4272 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4273 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4274 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4275 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4276 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4277 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4278
4279 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4280 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4281 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004282 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004283
4284 Examples :
4285 backend private
4286 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4287 source 192.168.1.200
4288
4289 backend transparent_ssl1
4290 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4291 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4292
4293 backend transparent_ssl2
4294 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4295 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4296 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4297
4298 backend transparent_ssl3
4299 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4300 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4301 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4302
4303 backend transparent_smtp
4304 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4305 # with Tproxy version 4.
4306 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4307
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004308 backend transparent_http
4309 # Connect to the servers using the client's IP as seen by previous
4310 # proxy.
4311 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1)
4312
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004313 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004314 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4315
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004316
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004317srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4318 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4319 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4320 yes | no | yes | yes
4321 Arguments :
4322 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4323 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4324 as explained at the top of this document.
4325
4326 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4327 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4328 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4329 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4330 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4331 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4332 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4333
4334 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4335 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4336 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4337 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4338 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004339 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004340 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004341 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004342
4343 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4344 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4345 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4346 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4347 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4348 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4349
4350 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4351 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4352
4353 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4354
4355
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004356stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4357 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4358 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4359 yes | no | yes | yes
4360 Arguments :
4361 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4362
4363 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4364
4365 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4366 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4367 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4368 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4369 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4370 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4371
4372 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4373 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4374 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4375 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4376
4377 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4378 report using "stats scope".
4379
4380 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4381 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4382 unobvious parameters.
4383
4384 Example :
4385 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4386 backend public_www
4387 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4388 stats enable
4389 stats hide-version
4390 stats scope .
4391 stats uri /admin?stats
4392 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4393 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4394 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4395
4396 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4397 backend private_monitoring
4398 stats enable
4399 stats uri /admin?stats
4400 stats refresh 5s
4401
4402 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4403
4404
4405stats enable
4406 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4407 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4408 yes | no | yes | yes
4409 Arguments : none
4410
4411 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4412 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4413 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4414 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4415 - stats auth : no authentication
4416 - stats scope : no restriction
4417
4418 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4419 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4420 unobvious parameters.
4421
4422 Example :
4423 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4424 backend public_www
4425 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4426 stats enable
4427 stats hide-version
4428 stats scope .
4429 stats uri /admin?stats
4430 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4431 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4432 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4433
4434 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4435 backend private_monitoring
4436 stats enable
4437 stats uri /admin?stats
4438 stats refresh 5s
4439
4440 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4441
4442
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004443stats hide-version
4444 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004445 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4446 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004447 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004448
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004449 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4450 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4451 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4452 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4453 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4454 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004455
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004456 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4457 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4458 unobvious parameters.
4459
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004460 Example :
4461 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4462 backend public_www
4463 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004464 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004465 stats hide-version
4466 stats scope .
4467 stats uri /admin?stats
4468 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4469 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4470 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004471
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004472 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4473 backend private_monitoring
4474 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004475 stats uri /admin?stats
4476 stats refresh 5s
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004477
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004478 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004479
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004480
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004481stats realm <realm>
4482 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4483 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4484 yes | no | yes | yes
4485 Arguments :
4486 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4487 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4488 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4489
4490 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4491 using a backslash ('\').
4492
4493 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4494 only related to authentication.
4495
4496 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4497 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4498 unobvious parameters.
4499
4500 Example :
4501 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4502 backend public_www
4503 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4504 stats enable
4505 stats hide-version
4506 stats scope .
4507 stats uri /admin?stats
4508 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4509 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4510 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4511
4512 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4513 backend private_monitoring
4514 stats enable
4515 stats uri /admin?stats
4516 stats refresh 5s
4517
4518 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4519
4520
4521stats refresh <delay>
4522 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4523 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4524 yes | no | yes | yes
4525 Arguments :
4526 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4527 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4528 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4529 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4530 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4531 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4532
4533 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4534 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4535 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4536 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4537
4538 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4539 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4540 unobvious parameters.
4541
4542 Example :
4543 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4544 backend public_www
4545 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4546 stats enable
4547 stats hide-version
4548 stats scope .
4549 stats uri /admin?stats
4550 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4551 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4552 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4553
4554 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4555 backend private_monitoring
4556 stats enable
4557 stats uri /admin?stats
4558 stats refresh 5s
4559
4560 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4561
4562
4563stats scope { <name> | "." }
4564 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4565 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4566 yes | no | yes | yes
4567 Arguments :
4568 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4569 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4570 section in which the statement appears.
4571
4572 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4573 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4574 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4575 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4576 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4577 exists.
4578
4579 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4580 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4581 unobvious parameters.
4582
4583 Example :
4584 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4585 backend public_www
4586 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4587 stats enable
4588 stats hide-version
4589 stats scope .
4590 stats uri /admin?stats
4591 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4592 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4593 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4594
4595 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4596 backend private_monitoring
4597 stats enable
4598 stats uri /admin?stats
4599 stats refresh 5s
4600
4601 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4602
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004603
4604stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4605 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4606 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4607 yes | no | yes | yes
4608
4609 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4610 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4611
4612 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4613 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
4614
4615 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4616 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4617 unobvious parameters.
4618
4619 Example :
4620 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4621 backend private_monitoring
4622 stats enable
4623 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
4624 stats uri /admin?stats
4625 stats refresh 5s
4626
4627 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4628 global section.
4629
4630
4631stats show-legends
4632 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4633 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4634 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4635 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4636 - IP (socket, server)
4637 - cookie (backend, server)
4638
4639 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4640 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4641 unobvious parameters.
4642
4643 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
4644
4645
4646stats show-node [ <name> ]
4647 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4648 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4649 yes | no | yes | yes
4650 Arguments:
4651 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4652 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
4653
4654 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4655 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4656 provided for each customer.
4657
4658 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4659 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4660 unobvious parameters.
4661
4662 Example:
4663 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4664 backend private_monitoring
4665 stats enable
4666 stats show-node Europe-1
4667 stats uri /admin?stats
4668 stats refresh 5s
4669
4670 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4671 section.
4672
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004673
4674stats uri <prefix>
4675 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4676 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4677 yes | no | yes | yes
4678 Arguments :
4679 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4680 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4681 query string.
4682
4683 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4684 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4685 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4686 possible to reach it in the application.
4687
4688 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004689 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004690 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4691 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4692 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4693 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4694
4695 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4696 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4697 an address or a port to statistics only.
4698
4699 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4700 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4701 unobvious parameters.
4702
4703 Example :
4704 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4705 backend public_www
4706 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4707 stats enable
4708 stats hide-version
4709 stats scope .
4710 stats uri /admin?stats
4711 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4712 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4713 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4714
4715 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4716 backend private_monitoring
4717 stats enable
4718 stats uri /admin?stats
4719 stats refresh 5s
4720
4721 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4722
4723
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004724stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4725 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004726 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004727 no | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004728
4729 Arguments :
4730 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4731 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4732 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4733 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4734
4735 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4736 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4737 the "stick-table" statement.
4738
4739 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4740 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4741 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4742 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4743 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4744
4745 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4746 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4747 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4748 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4749 transformation rules.
4750
4751 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4752 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4753 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4754 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4755 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4756 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4757 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4758
4759 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4760 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4761 ACL based conditions.
4762
4763 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4764 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4765 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4766 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4767
4768 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4769 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4770 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4771 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4772
4773 Example :
4774 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4775 # last 30 minutes
4776 backend pop
4777 mode tcp
4778 balance roundrobin
4779 stick store-request src
4780 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4781 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4782 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4783
4784 backend smtp
4785 mode tcp
4786 balance roundrobin
4787 stick match src table pop
4788 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4789 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4790
4791 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4792 extraction.
4793
4794
4795stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4796 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4797 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4798 no | no | yes | yes
4799
4800 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4801 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4802 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4803 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4804
4805 Examples :
4806 # The following form ...
Willy Tarreauec579d82010-02-26 19:15:04 +01004807 stick on src table pop if !localhost
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004808
4809 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4810 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4811 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4812
4813
4814 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4815 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4816 backend http
4817 mode http
4818 balance roundrobin
4819 stick on src table https
4820 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4821 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4822 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4823
4824 backend https
4825 mode tcp
4826 balance roundrobin
4827 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4828 stick on src
4829 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4830 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4831
4832 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4833
4834
4835stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4836 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4837 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4838 no | no | yes | yes
4839
4840 Arguments :
4841 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4842 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4843 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4844 server is selected.
4845
4846 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4847 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4848 the "stick-table" statement.
4849
4850 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4851 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4852 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4853 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4854 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4855 address.
4856
4857 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4858 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4859 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4860 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4861 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4862 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4863 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4864 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4865 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4866 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4867
4868 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4869 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4870 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4871 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4872 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4873 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4874 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4875
4876 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4877 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4878 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4879 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4880
4881 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4882 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4883 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4884 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4885 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4886 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4887 another protocol or access method.
4888
4889 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4890 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4891 the request.
4892
4893 Example :
4894 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4895 # last 30 minutes
4896 backend pop
4897 mode tcp
4898 balance roundrobin
4899 stick store-request src
4900 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4901 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4902 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4903
4904 backend smtp
4905 mode tcp
4906 balance roundrobin
4907 stick match src table pop
4908 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4909 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4910
4911 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4912 extraction.
4913
4914
4915stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4916 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4917 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4918 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4919 no | no | yes | yes
4920
4921 Arguments :
4922 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4923 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4924 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4925 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4926
4927 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4928 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4929 instance.
4930
4931 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4932 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4933 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4934 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4935 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4936 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4937 to 31 characters.
4938
4939 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4940 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4941 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4942 increase.
4943
4944 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01004945 value directly impacts memory usage. Count approximately
4946 50 bytes per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size
4947 supports suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004948
4949 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
4950 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
4951 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
4952 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
4953 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
4954 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
4955 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
4956 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
4957 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
4958 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
4959 parameter (see below).
4960
4961 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
4962 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
4963 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
4964 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
4965 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
4966 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
4967 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
4968 if not expiration delay is specified.
4969
4970 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
4971 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
4972 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
4973 reference it.
4974
4975 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
4976 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
4977 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
4978 as an exclusive stickiness.
4979
4980 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
4981 about time format.
4982
4983
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004984tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4985 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4986 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4987 no | yes | yes | no
4988
4989 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4990 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4991 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4992 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4993 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4994 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4995 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4996 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4997
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004998 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004999 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5000
5001 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
5002 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
5003 "reject" statement.
5004
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005005 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005006
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005007 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005008
5009
5010tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
5011 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5012 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5013 no | yes | yes | no
5014
5015 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
5016 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5017 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5018 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5019 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5020 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5021 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5022 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5023
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005024 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005025 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5026
5027 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
5028 "accept".
5029
5030 Example:
5031 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
5032 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5033 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5034 tcp-request reject if content_present
5035
5036 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
5037 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5038 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5039 tcp-request accept if content_present
5040 tcp-request reject
5041
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005042 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005043
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005044 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005045
5046
5047tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
5048 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
5049 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5050 no | yes | yes | no
5051 Arguments :
5052 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5053 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5054 as explained at the top of this document.
5055
5056 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
5057 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
5058 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
5059 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
5060 data for at most the specified amount of time.
5061
5062 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
5063 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005064 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005065 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01005066 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
5067 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
5068 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
5069 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005070
5071 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
5072 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
5073 it pass through unaffected.
5074
5075 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
5076 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
5077 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005078 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005079 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
5080 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
5081 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
5082
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005083 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005084 "timeout client".
5085
5086
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005087timeout check <timeout>
5088 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
5089 established.
5090
5091 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5092 yes | no | yes | yes
5093 Arguments:
5094 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5095 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5096 as explained at the top of this document.
5097
5098 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5099 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5100 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5101 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
Willy Tarreaud7550a22010-02-10 05:10:19 +01005102 (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
5103 timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
5104 avoid that).
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005105
5106 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5107 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5108
5109 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5110 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005111 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005112
5113 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5114 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5115 forget about it.
5116
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005117 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5118 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005119
5120
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005121timeout client <timeout>
5122timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5123 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5124 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5125 yes | yes | yes | no
5126 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005127 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005128 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5129 as explained at the top of this document.
5130
5131 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5132 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5133 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5134 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5135 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5136 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5137 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5138 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005139 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005140 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5141 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5142
5143 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5144 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5145 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5146 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5147 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5148 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5149
5150 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5151 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5152 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5153
5154 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5155
5156
5157timeout connect <timeout>
5158timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5159 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5160 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5161 yes | no | yes | yes
5162 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005163 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005164 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5165 as explained at the top of this document.
5166
5167 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005168 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005169 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005170 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005171 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5172 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005173
5174 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5175 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5176 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5177 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5178 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5179 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5180
5181 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5182 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5183 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5184
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005185 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5186 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005187
5188
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005189timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5190 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5191 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5192 yes | yes | yes | yes
5193 Arguments :
5194 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5195 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5196 as explained at the top of this document.
5197
5198 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5199 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5200 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5201 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5202 once the request has started to present itself.
5203
5204 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5205 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5206 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5207 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5208 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5209
5210 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5211 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5212 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5213 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5214
5215 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5216 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5217 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5218 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5219 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
5220 with tends to hundreds of thousands of clients.
5221
5222 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5223 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5224 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5225 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5226
5227 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5228
5229
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005230timeout http-request <timeout>
5231 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5232 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005233 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005234 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005235 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005236 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5237 as explained at the top of this document.
5238
5239 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5240 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5241 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5242 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5243 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5244 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5245 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5246 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5247
5248 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5249 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005250 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5251 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005252
5253 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5254 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5255 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5256 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5257 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5258
5259 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005260 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5261 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5262 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005263
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005264 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005265
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005266
5267timeout queue <timeout>
5268 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5269 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5270 yes | no | yes | yes
5271 Arguments :
5272 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5273 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5274 as explained at the top of this document.
5275
5276 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5277 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5278 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5279 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5280 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5281
5282 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5283 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5284 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5285 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5286
5287 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5288
5289
5290timeout server <timeout>
5291timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5292 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5293 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5294 yes | no | yes | yes
5295 Arguments :
5296 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5297 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5298 as explained at the top of this document.
5299
5300 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5301 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5302 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5303 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5304 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5305 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5306 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5307
5308 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5309 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5310 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5311 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5312 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005313 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005314 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005315 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005316
5317 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5318 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5319 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5320 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5321 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5322 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5323
5324 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5325 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5326 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5327
5328 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5329
5330
5331timeout tarpit <timeout>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005332 Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005333 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5334 yes | yes | yes | yes
5335 Arguments :
5336 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5337 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5338 as explained at the top of this document.
5339
5340 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5341 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5342 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5343
5344 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5345 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5346 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5347 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005348 with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005349
5350 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5351
5352
5353transparent (deprecated)
5354 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5355 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005356 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005357 Arguments : none
5358
5359 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5360 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5361 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5362 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5363 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5364 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5365 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5366 appropriate server.
5367
5368 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5369
5370 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5371 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5372
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005373 See also: "option transparent"
5374
5375
5376use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5377use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005378 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005379 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5380 no | yes | yes | no
5381 Arguments :
5382 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5383
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005384 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005385
5386 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5387 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5388 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005389 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5390 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5391 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5392 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005393
5394 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5395 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5396 assign the backend.
5397
5398 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5399 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5400 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5401 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5402 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5403 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5404
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005405 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005406 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005407 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5408 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5409 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5410
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005411 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005412
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005413
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010054145. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005415------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005416
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005417The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5418which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5419arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5420settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5421after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5422Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5423address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005424
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005425 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005426 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005427
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005428The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005429
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005430addr <ipv4>
5431 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5432 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5433 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5434 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5435 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005436
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005437 Supported in default-server: No
5438
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005439backup
5440 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5441 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5442 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5443 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5444 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5445 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005446
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005447 Supported in default-server: No
5448
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005449check
5450 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5451 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5452 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5453 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5454 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5455 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5456 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5457 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5458 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005459 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5460 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005461
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005462 Supported in default-server: No
5463
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005464cookie <value>
5465 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5466 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5467 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5468 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5469 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5470 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5471 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5472
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005473 Supported in default-server: No
5474
Willy Tarreau96839092010-03-29 10:02:24 +02005475disabled
5476 The "disabled" keyword starts the server in the "disabled" state. That means
5477 that it is marked down in maintenance mode, and no connection other than the
5478 ones allowed by persist mode will reach it. It is very well suited to setup
5479 new servers, because normal traffic will never reach them, while it is still
5480 possible to test the service by making use of the force-persist mechanism.
5481
5482 Supported in default-server: No
5483
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005484error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005485 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5486 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5487 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005488
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005489 Supported in default-server: Yes
5490
5491 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005492
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005493fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005494 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5495 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5496 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5497
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005498 Supported in default-server: Yes
5499
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005500id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005501 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5502 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5503 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005504
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005505 Supported in default-server: No
5506
5507inter <delay>
5508fastinter <delay>
5509downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005510 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5511 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5512 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5513 between checks depending on the server state :
5514
5515 Server state | Interval used
5516 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5517 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5518 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5519 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5520 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5521 or yet unchecked. |
5522 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5523 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5524 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005525
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005526 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5527 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5528 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5529 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5530 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5531 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5532 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5533 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5534 servers.
5535
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005536 Supported in default-server: Yes
5537
5538maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005539 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5540 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5541 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5542 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5543 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5544 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5545 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5546 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5547
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005548 Supported in default-server: Yes
5549
5550maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005551 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5552 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5553 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5554 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5555 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5556 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5557 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5558
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005559 Supported in default-server: Yes
5560
5561minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005562 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5563 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5564 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5565 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5566 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5567 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005568 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005569 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005570
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005571 Supported in default-server: Yes
5572
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005573observe <mode>
5574 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5575 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5576 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5577 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5578 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5579 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5580 headers, a timeout, etc.
5581
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005582 Supported in default-server: No
5583
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005584 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5585
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005586on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005587 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5588 Currently, four modes are available:
5589 - fastinter: force fastinter
5590 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5591 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5592 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5593 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5594
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005595 Supported in default-server: Yes
5596
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005597 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5598
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005599port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005600 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5601 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5602 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5603 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5604 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5605 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5606
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005607 Supported in default-server: Yes
5608
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005609redir <prefix>
5610 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5611 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5612 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5613 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5614 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5615 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5616 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5617 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005618 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005619 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5620 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5621 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5622 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5623 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5624
5625 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5626
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005627 Supported in default-server: No
5628
5629rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005630 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5631 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5632 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5633
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005634 Supported in default-server: Yes
5635
5636slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005637 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5638 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5639 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5640 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5641 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5642 parameters :
5643
5644 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5645 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5646
5647 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5648 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5649 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5650 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5651
5652 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5653 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5654 seen as failed.
5655
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005656 Supported in default-server: Yes
5657
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005658source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02005659source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005660source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005661 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5662 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5663 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5664 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5665
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005666 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5667 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5668 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5669 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5670 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5671 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5672 server.
5673
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005674 Supported in default-server: No
5675
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005676track [<proxy>/]<server>
5677 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5678 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5679 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5680 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5681 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005683 Supported in default-server: No
5684
5685weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005686 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5687 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5688 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005689 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5690 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5691 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5692 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5693 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5694 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005695
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005696 Supported in default-server: Yes
5697
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005698
56996. HTTP header manipulation
5700---------------------------
5701
5702In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5703response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5704request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5705which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5706against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5707to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5708passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5709headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5710never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5711
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005712There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5713(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5714rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5715messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5716in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005717happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005718add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5719normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5720
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005721This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5722in section 4.2 :
5723
5724 - reqadd <string>
5725 - reqallow <search>
5726 - reqiallow <search>
5727 - reqdel <search>
5728 - reqidel <search>
5729 - reqdeny <search>
5730 - reqideny <search>
5731 - reqpass <search>
5732 - reqipass <search>
5733 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5734 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5735 - reqtarpit <search>
5736 - reqitarpit <search>
5737 - rspadd <string>
5738 - rspdel <search>
5739 - rspidel <search>
5740 - rspdeny <search>
5741 - rspideny <search>
5742 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5743 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5744
5745With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5746is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5747parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5748prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5749Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5750
5751 \t for a tab
5752 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5753 \n for a new line (LF)
5754 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5755 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5756 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5757 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5758 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5759
5760The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5761portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5762above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5763regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
57649 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5765is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5766
5767The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5768after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5769
5770Notes related to these keywords :
5771---------------------------------
5772 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5773 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5774 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5775
5776 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5777 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5778 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5779
5780 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5781 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5782 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5783 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5784 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5785
5786 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5787 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5788 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5789 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5790 useless headers before adding new ones.
5791
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005792 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005793 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5794
5795 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5796 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5797 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5798
5799 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5800 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005801 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005802
5803
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010058047. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5805------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005806
5807The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5808content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5809from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5810simple :
5811
5812 - define test criteria with sets of values
5813 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5814
5815The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5816
5817In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5818
5819 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5820
5821This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5822Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5823and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5824an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5825of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5826
5827ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5828'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5829which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5830
5831There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5832performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5833
5834The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5835
5836 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005837 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5838
5839Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005840
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005841 - integers or integer ranges
5842 - strings
5843 - regular expressions
5844 - IP addresses and networks
5845
5846
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058477.1. Matching integers
5848----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005849
5850Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5851that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5852expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5853may be omitted.
5854
5855For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5856unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5857representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5858
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005859As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5860two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5861instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5862ranges and operators.
5863
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005864For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005865operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5866Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5867of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005868
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005869Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005870
5871 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5872 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5873 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5874 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5875 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5876
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005877For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005878
5879 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5880
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005881This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5882
5883 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5884
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005885
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058867.2. Matching strings
5887---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005888
5889String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5890exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5891characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5892string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5893to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005894before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005895
5896
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058977.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5898-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005899
5900Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5901they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5902possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5903passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5904the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005905the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5906match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005907
5908
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059097.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5910----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005911
5912IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5913netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5914within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005915host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005916difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5917at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5918does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5919parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005920
5921
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059227.5. Available matching criteria
5923--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005924
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059257.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5926------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005927
5928A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5929analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5930addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5931
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005932always_false
5933 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5934 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5935
5936always_true
5937 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5938 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5939
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005940avg_queue <integer>
5941avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5942 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5943 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5944 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5945 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5946 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5947 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5948 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5949 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5950 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5951 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5952 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01005953
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005954be_conn <integer>
5955be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5956 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5957 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5958 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5959 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5960 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005961
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005962be_sess_rate <integer>
5963be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5964 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5965 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5966 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
5967 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
5968 sucking of an online dictionary).
5969
5970 Example :
5971 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5972 backend dynamic
5973 mode http
5974 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5975 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005976
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005977connslots <integer>
5978connslots(backend) <integer>
5979 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005980 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005981 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5982
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005983 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5984 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005985
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005986 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005987 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5988 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5989 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5990 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5991 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005992 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005993
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005994 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5995 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5996 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5997 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005998
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005999dst <ip_address>
6000 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
6001 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006002
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006003dst_conn <integer>
6004 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
6005 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
6006 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
6007 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
6008 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
6009 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
6010
6011dst_port <integer>
6012 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
6013 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
6014
6015fe_conn <integer>
6016fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
6017 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
6018 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
6019 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6020 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
6021 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
6022 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
6023 criteria.
6024
6025fe_id <integer>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01006026 Applies to the frontend's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006027 frontend it was called.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006028
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006029fe_sess_rate <integer>
6030fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
6031 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
6032 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
6033 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
6034 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
6035 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
6036 the rate to go down below the limit.
6037
6038 Example :
6039 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
6040 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
6041 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
6042 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
6043 frontend mail
6044 bind :25
6045 mode tcp
6046 maxconn 100
6047 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
6048 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
6049 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
6050 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006051
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006052nbsrv <integer>
6053nbsrv(backend) <integer>
6054 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
6055 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
6056 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
6057 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
6058 "monitor fail".
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006059
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006060queue <integer>
6061queue(frontend) <integer>
6062 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
6063 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
6064 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
6065 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
6066 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
6067 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
6068 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
6069
6070so_id <integer>
6071 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
6072
6073src <ip_address>
6074 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
6075 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
6076 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
6077
6078src_port <integer>
6079 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006080
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006081
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060827.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
6083-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006084
6085A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
6086during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
6087through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
6088for more detailed information on the subject.
6089
6090req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006091 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006092 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
6093 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
6094 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
6095 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
6096 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
6097 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
6098
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006099req_proto_http
6100 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
6101 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006102 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006103 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
6104 using TCP request content inspection rules.
6105
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006106req_rdp_cookie <string>
6107req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
6108 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
6109 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6110 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6111 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6112 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6113 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6114 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6115 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6116
6117req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6118req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6119 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6120 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6121 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6122 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6123 cookies.
6124
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006125req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6126 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6127 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6128 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6129 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6130 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6131 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6132 with TCP request content inspection.
6133
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006134wait_end
6135 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6136 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6137 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6138 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6139 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6140 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6141 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6142 inspection.
6143
6144 Examples :
6145 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6146 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6147 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6148
6149 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6150 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6151 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6152 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6153 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6154 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6155 tcp-request content reject
6156
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006157
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061587.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6159--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006160
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006161A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006162application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6163read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6164than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6165
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006166hdr <string>
6167hdr(header) <string>
6168 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6169 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
6170 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6171 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
6172 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6173
6174 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
6175 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
6176 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6177
6178 hdr(Connection) -i close
6179
6180hdr_beg <string>
6181hdr_beg(header) <string>
6182 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
6183 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6184 response headers sent by the server.
6185
6186hdr_cnt <integer>
6187hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6188 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6189 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6190 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6191 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
6192 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
6193 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6194 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6195
6196hdr_dir <string>
6197hdr_dir(header) <string>
6198 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6199 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6200 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
6201 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6202 headers sent by the server.
6203
6204hdr_dom <string>
6205hdr_dom(header) <string>
6206 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6207 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6208 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
6209 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6210 server.
6211
6212hdr_end <string>
6213hdr_end(header) <string>
6214 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
6215 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6216 response headers sent by the server.
6217
6218hdr_ip <ip_address>
6219hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6220 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6221 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
6222 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6223 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6224
6225hdr_reg <regex>
6226hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6227 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6228 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6229 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
6230 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6231 response headers sent by the server.
6232
6233hdr_sub <string>
6234hdr_sub(header) <string>
6235 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
6236 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6237 response headers sent by the server.
6238
6239hdr_val <integer>
6240hdr_val(header) <integer>
6241 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6242 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6243 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
6244 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6245
6246http_auth(userlist)
6247http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6248 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6249 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6250 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6251 of specified groups.
6252
6253 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6254
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006255method <string>
6256 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6257 already check for most common methods.
6258
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006259path <string>
6260 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6261 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6262 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6263
6264path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006265 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6266 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006267
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006268path_dir <string>
6269 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6270 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6271 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6272 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6273
6274path_dom <string>
6275 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6276 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6277 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6278
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006279path_end <string>
6280 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6281 control file name extension.
6282
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006283path_reg <regex>
6284 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6285 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6286 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6287
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006288path_sub <string>
6289 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6290 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6291 "path_dir".
6292
6293req_ver <string>
6294 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6295 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6296
6297status <integer>
6298 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6299 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6300 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6301
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006302url <string>
6303 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6304 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6305
6306url_beg <string>
6307 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6308 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6309
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006310url_dir <string>
6311 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6312 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6313 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6314 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6315
6316url_dom <string>
6317 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6318 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6319 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6320
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006321url_end <string>
6322 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6323 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006324
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006325url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006326 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6327 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006328 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006329
6330url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006331 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6332 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006333 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006334 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006335
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006336url_reg <regex>
6337 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6338 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6339 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006340
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006341url_sub <string>
6342 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6343 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006344
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006345
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063467.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6347---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006348
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006349Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6350every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
6351order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
6352only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006353
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006354ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6355---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006356FALSE always_false never match
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006357HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006358HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6359HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006360HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
6361HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
6362HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
6363HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6364LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006365METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6366METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6367METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6368METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6369METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6370METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006371RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006372REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006373TRUE always_true always match
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006374WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6375---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006376
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006377
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063787.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6379----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006380
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006381Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6382combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006383
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006384 - AND (implicit)
6385 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6386 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006387
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006388A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006389
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006390 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006391
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006392Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6393indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006394
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006395For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6396"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6397requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6398is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006399
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006400 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6401 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6402 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6403 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006404
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006405To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6406and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006407
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006408 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6409 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6410 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6411 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006412
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006413 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6414 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6415 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6416 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006417
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006418It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6419expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6420be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6421the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6422
6423 The following rule :
6424
6425 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6426 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6427
6428 Can also be written that way :
6429
6430 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6431
6432It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6433to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6434simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6435sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6436good use is the following :
6437
6438 With named ACLs :
6439
6440 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6441 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6442 monitor fail if site_dead
6443
6444 With anonymous ACLs :
6445
6446 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6447
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006448See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006449
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006450
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010064517.8. Pattern extraction
6452-----------------------
6453
6454The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6455response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6456for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6457
6458All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6459"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6460begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6461arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6462much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6463equivalent used in ACLs.
6464
6465The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6466
6467 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6468 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6469
6470 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6471 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6472 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6473 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6474
6475 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6476 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6477 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6478 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6479 type integer and only works with such tables.
6480
6481
6482The currently available list of transformations include :
6483
6484 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6485 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6486 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6487
6488 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6489 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6490 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6491
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006492 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6493 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6494 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6495 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6496 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6497
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006498
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064998. Logging
6500----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006501
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006502One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6503provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6504very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6505provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6506state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006507to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006508headers.
6509
6510In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6511about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6512send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6513
6514 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6515 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6516 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6517 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6518 at the termination.
6519
6520The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6521allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6522as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6523while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6524real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6525delay.
6526
6527
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065288.1. Log levels
6529---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006530
6531TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6532source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6533HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6534in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6535particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006536syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006537facilities.
6538
6539
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065408.2. Log formats
6541----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006542
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006543HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006544and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6545the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6546formats are the following ones :
6547
6548 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6549 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6550 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6551 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6552 extents.
6553
6554 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6555 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6556 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6557 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6558 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6559
6560 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6561 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6562 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6563 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6564 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6565
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006566 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6567 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6568 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6569 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6570
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006571Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6572specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6573field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6574servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6575always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6576identifier.
6577
6578Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6579 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6580 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6581 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6582 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6583
6584
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065858.2.1. Default log format
6586-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006587
6588This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6589as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6590format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6591
6592 Example :
6593 listen www
6594 mode http
6595 log global
6596 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6597
6598 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6599 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6600 (www/HTTP)
6601
6602 Field Format Extract from the example above
6603 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6604 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6605 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6606 4 'to' to
6607 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6608 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6609
6610Detailed fields description :
6611 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6612 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6613 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6614 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6615 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6616 and processed the connection.
6617 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6618
6619It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6620will eventually disappear.
6621
6622
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066238.2.2. TCP log format
6624---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006625
6626The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6627is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6628information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6629counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6630emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6631environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6632the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6633sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006634specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6635not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6636fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6637marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006638
6639 Example :
6640 frontend fnt
6641 mode tcp
6642 option tcplog
6643 log global
6644 default_backend bck
6645
6646 backend bck
6647 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6648
6649 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6650 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6651 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6652
6653 Field Format Extract from the example above
6654 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6655 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6656 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6657 4 frontend_name fnt
6658 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6659 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6660 7 bytes_read* 212
6661 8 termination_state --
6662 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6663 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6664
6665Detailed fields description :
6666 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6667 connection to haproxy.
6668
6669 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6670
6671 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6672 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6673 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6674 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6675
6676 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6677 and processed the connection.
6678
6679 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6680 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6681 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6682 applications.
6683
6684 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6685 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6686 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6687 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6688 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6689
6690 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6691 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6692 See "Timers" below for more details.
6693
6694 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6695 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6696 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6697 "Timers" below for more details.
6698
6699 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6700 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6701 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6702 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6703 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6704 details.
6705
6706 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6707 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6708 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6709 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6710 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6711
6712 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6713 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6714 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6715 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6716 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6717 for more details.
6718
6719 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6720 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6721 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6722 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6723 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006724 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006725
6726 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6727 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6728 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6729 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6730 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6731 caused by a denial of service attack.
6732
6733 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6734 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6735 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6736 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6737 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6738 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6739 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6740 denial of service attack.
6741
6742 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6743 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6744 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6745 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6746 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6747 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6748 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6749 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6750 be processed than on other servers.
6751
6752 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6753 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6754 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6755 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6756 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6757 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6758 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6759 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6760 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6761 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6762 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6763 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6764 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6765
6766 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6767 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6768 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6769 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6770 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6771 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6772 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6773 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6774
6775 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6776 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6777 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6778 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6779 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6780 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6781 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6782 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6783 occurs.
6784
6785
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067868.2.3. HTTP log format
6787----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006788
6789The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6790is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6791the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6792are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6793emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6794generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6795"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6796which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006797frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6798is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006799
6800Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6801slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6802with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6803
6804 Example :
6805 frontend http-in
6806 mode http
6807 option httplog
6808 log global
6809 default_backend bck
6810
6811 backend static
6812 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6813
6814 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6815 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6816 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006817 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006818
6819 Field Format Extract from the example above
6820 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6821 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6822 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6823 4 frontend_name http-in
6824 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6825 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6826 7 status_code 200
6827 8 bytes_read* 2750
6828 9 captured_request_cookie -
6829 10 captured_response_cookie -
6830 11 termination_state ----
6831 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6832 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6833 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6834 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6835 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006836
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006837
6838Detailed fields description :
6839 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6840 connection to haproxy.
6841
6842 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6843
6844 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6845 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6846 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6847 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6848 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6849
6850 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6851 and processed the connection.
6852
6853 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6854 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6855 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6856
6857 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6858 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6859 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6860 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6861 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6862 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6863
6864 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6865 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6866 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6867 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6868 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6869 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6870
6871 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6872 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6873 See "Timers" below for more details.
6874
6875 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6876 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6877 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6878 below for more details.
6879
6880 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6881 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6882 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6883 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6884 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6885 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6886 for more details.
6887
6888 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6889 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6890 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6891 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6892 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6893 details.
6894
6895 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6896 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6897 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6898
6899 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6900 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6901 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6902 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6903 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6904 overflowing.
6905
6906 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6907 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6908 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6909 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6910 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6911 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6912 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6913 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6914
6915 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6916 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6917 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
6918 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
6919 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
6920 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
6921 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
6922 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6923
6924 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6925 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6926 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
6927 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6928 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6929 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6930 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6931
6932 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6933 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6934 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6935 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6936 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006937 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006938 system.
6939
6940 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6941 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6942 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6943 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6944 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6945 caused by a denial of service attack.
6946
6947 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6948 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6949 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6950 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6951 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6952 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6953 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6954 denial of service attack.
6955
6956 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6957 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6958 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6959 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6960 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6961 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6962 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6963 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6964 processed than on other servers.
6965
6966 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6967 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6968 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6969 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6970 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6971 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6972 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6973 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6974 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6975 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6976 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6977 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6978 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6979
6980 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6981 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6982 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6983 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6984 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6985 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6986 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6987 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6988
6989 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6990 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6991 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6992 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6993 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6994 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6995 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6996 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6997 occurs.
6998
6999 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
7000 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
7001 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
7002 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
7003 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
7004 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
7005 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
7006 cookies" below for more details.
7007
7008 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
7009 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
7010 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
7011 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
7012 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
7013 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
7014 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
7015 and cookies" below for more details.
7016
7017 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
7018 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
7019 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
7020 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
7021 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
7022 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
7023 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
7024 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
7025
7026
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070278.3. Advanced logging options
7028-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007029
7030Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
7031just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
7032options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
7033for more information about their usage.
7034
7035
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070368.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
7037------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007038
7039It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
7040haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
7041commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
7042monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
7043ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
7044
7045 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
7046 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
7047 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
7048 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
7049
7050 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
7051 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
7052 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
7053 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
7054 such as other load-balancers.
7055
7056 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
7057 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
7058 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
7059
7060
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070618.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
7062----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007063
7064The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
7065what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
7066or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
7067"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
7068just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
7069log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
7070after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
7071is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
7072with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
7073with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
7074
7075
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070768.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
7077------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007078
7079Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
7080for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
7081"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
7082retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
7083raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
7084a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
7085file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
7086you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
7087"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
7088
7089
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020070908.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
7091--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007092
7093Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
7094multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
7095them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
7096"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
7097logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
7098error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
7099and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
7100too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
7101useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
7102alternative.
7103
7104
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071058.4. Timing events
7106------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007107
7108Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
7109reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7110the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7111frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7112mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7113
7114 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7115 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7116 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7117 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7118 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7119
7120 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7121 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7122 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7123 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7124 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7125
7126 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7127 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7128 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7129 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7130 connection never established.
7131
7132 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7133 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7134 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7135 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7136 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7137 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7138 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7139 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7140 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7141 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7142 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7143
7144 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7145 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7146 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7147 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7148 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7149
7150 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7151
7152 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7153 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7154 negative.
7155
7156These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7157protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7158that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007159due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007160close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7161session has been aborted on timeout.
7162
7163Most common cases :
7164
7165 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7166 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7167 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7168 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7169 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7170 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7171 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7172 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7173 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7174 connections have been accepted at once.
7175
7176 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7177 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7178 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7179 of ms on remote networks.
7180
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007181 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7182 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7183 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007184
7185 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7186 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7187 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7188 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7189 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7190 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7191 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7192 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7193 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7194 to the server until another one is released.
7195
7196Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7197
7198 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7199 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7200 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7201
7202 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7203 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7204 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7205
7206 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7207 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7208 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7209 flags.
7210
7211 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7212 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7213 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7214 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7215 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7216 the client connection was maintained open.
7217
7218 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7219 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7220 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7221 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7222
7223
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072248.5. Session state at disconnection
7225-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007226
7227TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7228"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
72292-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7230each of which has a special meaning :
7231
7232 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7233 session to terminate :
7234
7235 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7236
7237 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7238 server explicitly refused it.
7239
7240 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7241 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7242 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7243 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7244 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7245 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7246
7247 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7248 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7249 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7250 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7251 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7252
7253 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7254 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7255 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7256 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7257 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7258
7259 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7260 send or receive data.
7261
7262 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7263 send or receive data.
7264
7265 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7266 with nothing left in the buffers.
7267
7268 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7269
7270 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7271 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7272
7273 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7274 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7275 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7276 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7277 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7278
7279 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7280 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7281
7282 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7283 server (HTTP only).
7284
7285 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7286
7287 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7288 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7289 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7290
7291 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7292 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7293 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7294
7295 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7296
7297 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7298 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7299
7300 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7301 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7302 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7303
7304 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7305 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
7306 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
7307
7308 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7309 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7310 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7311 another server.
7312
7313 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7314 server.
7315
7316 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7317
7318 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7319 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7320
7321 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7322
7323 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7324 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7325 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7326
7327 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7328
7329 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7330 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7331
7332 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7333
7334 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7335
7336The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7337happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7338helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7339starvation, attacks, etc...
7340
7341The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7342alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7343easier finding and understanding.
7344
7345 Flags Reason
7346
7347 -- Normal termination.
7348
7349 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7350 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7351 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7352 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7353
7354 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7355 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7356 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7357 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7358 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7359 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007360
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007361 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7362 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7363 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7364
7365 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7366 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7367 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7368
7369 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7370 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7371 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7372 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7373 the server takes too long to respond.
7374
7375 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7376 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7377 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7378 long a time to respond.
7379
7380 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7381 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7382 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7383 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7384 and the client.
7385
7386 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7387 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7388 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7389 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7390 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7391 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7392
7393 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7394 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007395 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7396 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7397 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7398 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007399
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007400 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007401 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7402 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7403 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7404 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7405 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7406
7407 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7408 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7409 503 or 504 here.
7410
7411 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7412 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7413 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7414 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7415 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7416
7417 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7418 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007419 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007420 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7421 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7422
7423 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7424 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7425 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7426 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7427 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7428 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7429 between haproxy and the server.
7430
7431 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7432 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7433 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7434 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7435 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7436 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7437 solution is to fix the application.
7438
7439 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7440 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7441 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7442 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7443 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7444 external attacks.
7445
7446 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7447 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7448 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7449 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7450 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7451
7452 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7453 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7454 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7455 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7456 containing unauthorized characters.
7457
7458 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7459 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7460 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7461 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7462
7463 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7464 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7465 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7466 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7467
7468 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7469 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7470 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7471 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7472
7473
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074748.6. Non-printable characters
7475-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007476
7477In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7478consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7479converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7480prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7481being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7482escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7483is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7484'}' when logging headers.
7485
7486Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7487issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7488containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7489
7490Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7491the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7492performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7493
7494
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074958.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7496---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007497
7498Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7499achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007500section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007501cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7502the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7503the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007504locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007505not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7506user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7507a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7508wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7509
7510 Examples :
7511 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7512 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7513
7514 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7515 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7516
7517
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075188.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7519---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007520
7521Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7522proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7523the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7524server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7525
7526Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7527response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007528section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007529
7530It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007531time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7532appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007533are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7534and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7535follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7536request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7537in the logs.
7538
7539 Example :
7540 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7541 listen proxy-out
7542 mode http
7543 option httplog
7544 option logasap
7545 log global
7546 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7547
7548 # log the name of the virtual server
7549 capture request header Host len 20
7550
7551 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7552 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7553
7554 # log the beginning of the referrer
7555 capture request header Referer len 20
7556
7557 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7558 capture response header Server len 20
7559
7560 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7561 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7562
7563 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7564 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7565
7566 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7567 capture response header Via len 20
7568
7569 # log the URL location during a redirection
7570 capture response header Location len 20
7571
7572 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7573 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7574 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7575 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7576 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7577
7578 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7579 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7580 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7581 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007582 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007583
7584 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7585 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7586 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7587 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7588 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007589 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007590
7591
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075928.9. Examples of logs
7593---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007594
7595These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7596them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7597reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7598
7599 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7600 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7601 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7602
7603 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7604 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7605
7606 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7607 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7608 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7609
7610 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7611 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7612
7613 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7614 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7615 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7616
7617 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007618 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007619 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7620 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7621
7622 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7623 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7624 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7625
7626 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7627 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7628 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7629 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7630 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7631 to return the 502 and not the server.
7632
7633 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007634 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007635
7636 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7637 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7638 Nothing was sent to any server.
7639
7640 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7641 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7642
7643 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7644 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7645 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7646 send a 408 return code to the client.
7647
7648 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7649 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7650
7651 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7652 5 seconds ("c----").
7653
7654 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7655 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007656 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007657
7658 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007659 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007660 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7661 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7662 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7663 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7664 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007665
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007666
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076679. Statistics and monitoring
7668----------------------------
7669
7670It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7671mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7672CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7673Unix socket.
7674
7675
76769.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007677---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007678
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007679The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7680page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7681
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007682 0. pxname: proxy name
7683 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7684 for server)
7685 2. qcur: current queued requests
7686 3. qmax: max queued requests
7687 4. scur: current sessions
7688 5. smax: max sessions
7689 6. slim: sessions limit
7690 7. stot: total sessions
7691 8. bin: bytes in
7692 9. bout: bytes out
7693 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007694 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007695 12. ereq: request errors
7696 13. econ: connection errors
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007697 14. eresp: response errors (among which srv_abrt)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007698 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7699 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007700 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007701 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7702 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7703 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7704 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7705 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7706 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7707 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7708 25. qlimit: queue limit
7709 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7710 27. iid: unique proxy id
7711 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7712 29. throttle: warm up status
7713 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7714 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007715 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007716 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7717 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7718 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007719 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007720 UNK -> unknown
7721 INI -> initializing
7722 SOCKERR -> socket error
7723 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7724 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7725 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7726 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7727 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7728 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7729 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7730 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7731 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7732 disable-on-404
7733 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7734 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7735 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007736 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7737 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007738 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7739 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7740 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7741 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7742 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7743 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007744 45. hanafail: failed health checks details
7745 46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
7746 47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
7747 48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007748 49. cli_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the client
7749 50. srv_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the server (inc. in eresp)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007750
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007751
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020077529.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007753-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007754
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007755The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007756must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7757is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7758a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7759risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7760followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7761given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7762then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7763to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007764
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007765It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7766on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7767own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007768
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007769clear counters
7770 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7771 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7772 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
7773 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7774 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7775
7776clear counters all
7777 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
7778 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7779 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7780
7781disable server <backend>/<server>
7782 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7783 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7784 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7785 during the maintenance.
7786
7787 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
7788 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
7789
7790 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7791 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7792
7793 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7794 level "admin".
7795
7796enable server <backend>/<server>
7797 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7798 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7799
7800 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7801 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7802
7803 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7804 level "admin".
7805
7806get weight <backend>/<server>
7807 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7808 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7809 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
7810 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7811 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7812 dash ('#').
7813
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007814help
7815 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7816 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007817
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007818prompt
7819 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7820 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7821 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7822 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7823 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7824 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7825 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7826 command.
7827
7828quit
7829 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007830
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007831set timeout cli <delay>
7832 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7833 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7834 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7835
7836set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7837 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7838 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7839 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7840 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7841 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7842 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7843 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7844 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7845 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7846 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7847 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
7848 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7849 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7850 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7851
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007852show errors [<iid>]
7853 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7854 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007855 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7856 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7857 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007858
7859 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7860 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7861 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7862 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7863 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7864 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7865 are reported too.
7866
7867 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7868 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7869 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7870 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7871 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7872 code.
7873
7874 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7875 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7876 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7877 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7878 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7879 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7880 line.
7881
7882 Example :
7883 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7884 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7885 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7886 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7887
7888 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7889 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7890 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7891 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7892 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7893 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7894 00204+ minal\r\n
7895 00211 \r\n
7896
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007897 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007898 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7899 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7900 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7901 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7902 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7903 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007904
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007905show info
7906 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7907
7908show sess
7909 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007910 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7911 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7912
Willy Tarreau66dc20a2010-03-05 17:53:32 +01007913show sess <id>
7914 Display a lot of internal information about the specified session identifier.
7915 This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
7916 of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). Those information are
7917 useless to most users but may be used by haproxy developers to troubleshoot a
7918 complex bug. The output format is intentionally not documented so that it can
7919 freely evolve depending on demands.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007920
7921show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
7922 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
7923 possible to dump only selected items :
7924 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
7925 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
7926 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
7927 for example:
7928 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
7929 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
7930 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
7931
7932 Example :
7933 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
7934 Name: HAProxy
7935 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
7936 Release_date: 2009/09/23
7937 Nbproc: 1
7938 Process_num: 1
7939 (...)
7940
7941 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
7942 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
7943 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
7944 (...)
7945 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
7946
7947 $
7948
7949 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
7950 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
7951 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
7952 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007953 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007954
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007955
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01007956/*
7957 * Local variables:
7958 * fill-column: 79
7959 * End:
7960 */